JP2015024250A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabled to prevent a holding notice from being executed in a constant combination in the case where a game medium passes simultaneously through a plurality of start areas.SOLUTION: On the basis of a read-ahead determination result, a holding notice determination random number and a holding display change number determination random number which are extracted from a holding notice determination random number counter and a holding display change number determination random number counter, there is executed a holding notice performance for displaying a mode (e.g., a round display of a blue color, a red color or a rainbow color) different from an ordinary mode (e.g., a round display of a green color). In this case, a holding notice determination random number counter and a reservation display change number determination random number counter are provided in plurality in a manner to correspond to an aggregation reservation memory number. Moreover, the individual holding determination random number counter and the reservation display change number determination random number counter update the random numbers so that they may not synchronize with the holding notice determination random number counter or the reservation display change number determination random number counter corresponding to the other aggregation reservation memory number.

Description

  The present invention is based on the fact that each of a plurality of game media can pass through the first start area and the second start area at the same time, and the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that performs variable display, derives and displays a display result, and controls to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  This type of gaming machine usually determines immediately whether or not to make a big hit or reach based on the start winning when the game ball starts to win in the start winning opening provided in the game area. Instead, each random number value is read out at a timing when the variable display based on the start winning can be started, and it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or reach.

  On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, before executing the variable display based on the start winning prize, the random number value is pre-read in advance to determine whether it is a big hit or reach and a pre-read notice is executed. There is something configured to do. For example, in Patent Document 1, in a gaming machine equipped with two start winning openings, whether or not a big hit is made in advance at the start winning timing and the category of the variation pattern are pre-readed, and a pending notice is given as a pre-reading advance notice. It is described to be executed. Further, for example, Patent Document 2 describes that a pre-reading determination is made in advance at the timing of a start winning prize, and a continuous notice is executed as a pre-reading notice, and a mode of continuous notice is determined using a table corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Has been.

JP 2011-110257 (paragraph 0154-0214, paragraph 0374-0375, FIG. 11-13, FIG. 45) JP 2003-325827 A (paragraph 0093-0098, paragraph 0131-0133, paragraph 0142-0162, FIG. 25-29)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a holding notice is executed using the same judgment value or numerical data (random number) in a gaming machine having a plurality of start areas regardless of the current number of reserved memories. In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 2, the mode of continuous notice is determined using a different table according to the number of reserved memories, but the numerical value range and update timing of the update regardless of the current number of reserved memories. The mode of continuous notice is determined using the numerical value data for production that is the same. However, when the configuration described in Patent Document 1 and the configuration described in Patent Document 2 are combined, if the game medium passes through a plurality of start areas at the same time, the numerical value data for presentation extracted at the same timing is used. Therefore, there is a problem that the hold notice is always executed in a certain combination when a game medium passes through a plurality of start areas at the same time.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a holding notice from being executed in a certain combination when a game medium passes through a plurality of starting areas at the same time.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13) and a second start area (for example, the second start winning opening 14) with a plurality of game media (for example, games). Spheres) can pass at the same time, and based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area or the second start area, variable display is performed and the display result is derived and displayed, and the display result is determined in advance. A gaming machine that controls to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to a player when a specified display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, wherein the first start area or the second start area For variable display that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the storage medium, a storage unit (for example, a first storage buffer, a second storage buffer) that can be stored as storage, Hold display means for displaying hold specific information (for example, hold display) corresponding to each of the hold memories stored in the storage means (for example, a part for executing steps S6507 and S6514 in the production control microcomputer 100); And a determination means (for example, a part for executing step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the reservation storage read from the storage means, and controlled to the advantageous state. Determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S1217 and S1228 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and numerical value data for production (for example, a hold notice determination random number, hold) The display change frequency determination random number) is set within a predetermined numerical range (for example, FIGS. 56 to 5). As shown in Fig. 5, the numerical value range of 1-937, 1-941, 1-947, 1-953, 1-967, 1-971, 1-977, 1-983 for the pending notice determination random number counter. About the number determination random number counter, the numerical data updating means for production (for example, the hold) is updated in 1 to 157, 1 to 163, 1 to 167, 1 to 173, 1 to 179, 1 to 181, and 1 to 191. Based on the timing at which the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area, and the numerical value data for effect updated by the effect numerical data update means, Numerical value extraction means for effect to be extracted (for example, a part that executes steps S6503 and S6509 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Minute) and the determination result by the determination means and the numerical value data for rendering extracted by the numerical value data extraction means for rendering, the display mode of the hold specific information corresponding to the hold storage that is the object of the determination is a special mode. On hold notice execution means (for example, in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) for executing a hold notice (for example, a hold notice effect) (for example, a blue circle display, a red circle display, and a rainbow color circle display). Steps S6507 and S661 to S662E) and a specific effect that executes a specific effect different from the hold notice before the variable display subject to the determination is started based on the determination result by the determination means. An execution means, and a plurality of production numerical data update means in association with the number of reserved storage (for example, eight holds for the total number of reserved memories 1 to 8) Each of the presentation numerical data updating means corresponding to the other stored numbers is produced by the presentation numeric data updating means corresponding to the other stored numbers. The production numerical data is updated so as not to synchronize with the update result of the numerical data for use (for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the pending notice determination random number counters are 1 to 937, 1 to 941, 1 to 1, respectively. Random numbers are updated in numerical ranges different from 947, 1 to 953, 1 to 967, 1 to 971, 1 to 977, and 1 to 983. The on-hold display change frequency determination random number counter updates the random numbers in numerical ranges different from 1 to 157, 1 to 163, 1 to 167, 1 to 173, 1 to 179, 1 to 181, and 1 to 191, respectively. The effect numerical data extracting means extracts the effect numerical data updated by the effect numerical data updating means corresponding to the current stored number (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effects control microcomputer 100 in steps S6503 and S6509). 56 to 58, random numbers are extracted from a hold notice determination random number counter or a hold display change count determination random number counter updated with random numbers in mutually different numerical ranges).
With such a configuration, even when game media pass through a plurality of starting areas at the same time, the numerical value data for presentation that has been updated without being synchronized with each other corresponding to the number of stored storages is extracted to hold the advance notice. Can be executed. Therefore, when a game medium passes through a plurality of start areas at the same time, it is possible to prevent the hold notice from being executed in a certain combination.

(Means 2) In the means 1, each of the production numerical data update means updates the production numeric data in a different numerical range from the production numeric data update means corresponding to the other stored numbers (for example, FIG. 56 to FIG. As shown in 58, the pending notice determination random number counter is different from 1-937, 1-941, 1-947, 1-953, 1-967, 1-971, 1-977, 1-983, respectively. Random numbers are updated in a numerical range, and the pending display change frequency determination random number counter is different from 1 to 157, 1 to 163, 1 to 167, 1 to 173, 1 to 179, 1 to 181, and 1 to 191, respectively. The random number may be updated within a numerical range.) According to such a configuration, by updating the numerical value range to be updated, it is possible to prevent the updating of the numerical data for production by the respective numerical data updating means for production, so that the pending notice is a fixed combination. It can be prevented from being executed.

(Means 3) In means 2, the maximum value of the numerical value range in which each of the production numerical data updating means updates the production numerical data is the production numerical data update means corresponding to the other stored numbers. The maximum value of the numerical range to be updated is relatively prime (for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the maximum value of the pending notice determination random number counter is 937, 941, 947, 953, 967, 971, 977, respectively. 983. The maximum value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter is relatively prime to 157, 163, 167, 173, 179, 181, and 191.) . According to such a configuration, the numerical value data for effect updated by each numerical value data updating unit for effect is likely to vary, and the update of the numerical value data for effect can be further prevented from being synchronized.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, each of the production numerical data update means updates the production numeric data at an update cycle different from that of the production numeric data update means corresponding to the other stored numbers. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the hold notice determination random number counter updates the random numbers at different update cycles for every 1 timer interrupt to every 8 timer interrupts. The counter may be configured to update the random number at a different update period for each timer interrupt to every 7 timer interrupts.) According to such a configuration, by changing the update cycle, it is possible to prevent the updating of the production numerical data by each production numerical data update means, and the hold notice is executed in a certain combination. Can be prevented.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4, game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and variable display based on information from the game control means Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing the effect, and the game control means can hold storage information (for example, the first start winning designation command, the first, 2 start winning designation command, total reserved memory number designation command) holding memory information transmission means (for example, a part for executing steps S1220, S1221, S1231, S1232 in the game control microcomputer 560) and determination by the determination means Sends determination result information (for example, symbol designation command, variation category command) indicating the result. Determination result information transmission means (for example, a portion of steps S1218, S1219, S1229, and S1230 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means includes at least one of the stored storage information and the determination result information. Is not normally received, the hold notice limiting means for restricting the execution of the hold notice (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the hold notice in steps S6503 to S6513 when Y in step S6502). The process may be configured to include step S6514 without shifting to the process of determining the presence / absence / mode of production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pending notice from being erroneously executed without being based on the determination result of the determination unit.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a hold notice production | presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation notice determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding display change frequency determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending | holding display change frequency determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number update process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a random number update process.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red.Note that the display color varies depending on the type of big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, or 2R probability variation big hit) When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 5R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit). The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total number of pending pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, It is displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue).

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, with the exception of the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is always shifted to the probability change state. However, when the big hit is made, the game may be shifted to a so-called short-time state in addition to the probability change state. A machine may be configured. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area (output) where the output state of the output port is saved Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve the high base state only by shifting to the high probability state. . However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden probability variation jackpot with a high probability / low base state, the probability of all variations display is high until the variation display for the 71st rotation is terminated after the jackpot game with the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated. / Because it is in the state controlled to the low base state, the ratio of super reach becomes high in all the change displays until the probability variation state ends. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, the ratio of the super reach in the high probability / low base state is not necessarily increased every time, but the super reach is achieved. You may make it provide the time of raising a ratio and the time of not raising (it is a normal ratio). In addition, for example, instead of looking at the gaming state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of variable displays after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variable display is obtained. Only occasionally you may increase the percentage of superreach. With such a configuration, when a sudden probability change big hit with a high probability / low base state is provided, after reaching the big hit game with the sudden probability change big hit, the super reach of each time until the end of the probability change state is displayed. It is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate is continuously increased.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used in the case where the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation per unit, 10R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach And normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also to a high base state, There are two cases: a case where only the probability state is transferred and a state where the high base state is not transferred (ie, the low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a high probability state and a high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times, and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until the variable display is ended 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is transferred. There may be a certain probability change state (which is a low base state).

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability variation big hit as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value There are cases where 15 rounds of probability variation big hit “15R probability variation big hit”, 10 rounds probability variation big hit “10R probability variation big hit” and 2 rounds probability variation big hit “2R probability variation big hit” as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. In addition, there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in this implementation. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types of jackpot types may be provided.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 10-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high base The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that allows only two (2 rounds) opening of the big prize opening as in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit” described later. The open time of the big prize opening per round is long (in this embodiment, 29 seconds). Therefore, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit”, which will be described later, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but in the case of “2R probable big hit”, the big winning Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big prize mouth during the big hit game.

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the big winning opening is less than “15R probability change big hit” or “10R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, whereas “sudden probability variation big hit” takes one round. The opening time of the winning jackpot is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a winning prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the high probability state and is also changed to the high base state. (See S166 to S169). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming super reach when executing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased, but suddenly without the small hit and the high base state. When it is configured to provide a probable big hit, when the ratio of super reach is not necessarily increased every time in the 71st fluctuation display, but when the ratio of super reach is increased or not increased (the normal ratio is maintained) And a variation pattern may be selected with the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state in the high probability state after suddenly probable big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value and correspond to "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", and "sudden probability variation big hit", respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”. 9B is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B in the assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, it is used for determining the variation pattern type. If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation jackpot and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is suddenly probable big hit state, the big hit state with 15R probable big hit, 10R probable big hit or 2R probable big hit The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of control.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 10D shows a high probability / low base state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state (a state from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display after the big hit) Shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used in the case of The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, in this embodiment, even when the probability variation state is present, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, the previous time is displayed. Compared to the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the proportion of variation patterns with super reach is higher. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit of the player at the end of the probability variation state is performed by performing the super reach variation display with a high probability in the last variation display where the probability variation state ends. The feeling is heightened. In addition, not only the last 71th variation display, for example, increasing the ratio of super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, etc. Super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variation display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variation display ends. Thus, in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high base state is continued until the 71st variation display is completed. In the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state, the high probability / high base state may be controlled. However, if controlled in this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment are selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process, as will be described later. (Refer to Steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). However, since the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state remains in the high probability / high base state, the state of the flag is confirmed in this way. It becomes impossible to select the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. Thus, in the case of controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter, which will be described later, are confirmed, and the counter value If the remaining is once, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation is selected. Good.

  Further, when the ratio of the super reach is increased from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, for example, a high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set the counter and the high base number counter to 75 times (for example, set both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to 75, and the high probability / high base state until 75 times of variable display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75 and the high base count counter is set to 70. From the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display, the high probability / low It is also possible to control to the base state.In the case of controlling to the high probability / low base state from the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S95, S96, S100, S101))) At the start of the variable display, whether or not the value of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter is within a predetermined number (for example, 5) or not (the remaining number of probability variation states) Is within the predetermined number of times), and if it is within the predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for detachment with the increased super reach ratio shown in FIG. If the counter value is still larger than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table for detachment shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected (the probability change state is ended). For example, the configuration may be configured in such a manner that the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the counter value for counting the number of variations after the big hit game is 71, for example, In such a case, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of reserved storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that includes only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that includes normal reach and pseudo-continuity. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 with a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small In the case of “hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game with “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit”, or “2R probability change big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by 1. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command to be transmitted as the stored storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 21), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This is the same for the subsequent variation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 10 (C) and (D). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that it becomes “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden probability variation is a big win at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, a pre-reading notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effects include those that are immediately executed at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be notified is generated (holding notice effect described later), and the start winning for the variable display that is to be notified. An effect is started from a variation display that starts after the occurrence, and is continuously executed over a plurality of variation displays before the start of the variation display that is the subject of the notice effect. Change of time variation mode, “mode transition”, “continuous notice effect” in the form of “countdown”). However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time. However, with regard to the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” mode described later, if the countdown is only once or intermittent, the effect becomes unnatural, so it can be performed continuously over a plurality of variable displays. desirable.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the game state (for example, whether the game is in a high probability state or a high base state, whether or not a big hit game is being played) The winning determination process is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is always transmitted, and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute a prefetch notice to give a notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, or if the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14 If this occurs, start-port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 29), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. Further, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening the special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening the special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 20A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 20A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 20B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the time of starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the first winning prize opening 13 is won.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in an on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, hardware Random random R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the second starting winning opening 14 is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  When a game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 at the same time, both the processes of steps S1218 to S1221 and steps S1229 to S1232 are performed within one timer interruption. In this case, a command set of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a first starting winning designating command, and a combined pending storage number designating command for the start winning to the first starting winning port 13; A total of eight commands, including a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a second startup prize designation command, and a combined pending memory number designation command set for a starting prize to the two starting prize opening 14, are transmitted within one timer interruption. It will be.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A pre-reading notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If the 15R probability variation big hit, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 2R probability variation big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit occurs before, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation may change from a normal state to a probability variation state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the case where determination using other threshold values shown below is performed.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “10R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when determining that “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 20A) is “first” data. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the variation display of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is set to the jackpot determination in the low probability state in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start-port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit”, “2R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (71 in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Do. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “2R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “10R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit”, “2R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not it will be reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Specifically, whether or not it is “10R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “2R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. When it is neither “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (that is, when “sudden probability variation big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), A control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, “2R-probable big hit” or “suddenly promiscuous big hit” is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (big hit type (Data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times. “10R probability variation big hit” is 10 times. “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit” is displayed. (Two times in case) is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In this case, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit and the case of 2R probability variation big hit, although the same two times are set as the number of rounds, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 2R probability change big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Note that 29 seconds is set as the round time even in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and “sudden probability sudden big hit” Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of display of fluctuation in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in a high base number counter for counting the number of times of change display in the high base state (step S169).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the high probability / high base state is transitioned to after the big hit game ends, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is terminated 70 times. And after the end of the big hit, the transition to the high probability / low base state is made from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display. Return to.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  32 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 36, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process of FIG. 19, when there is a start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14 In addition, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a combined pending storage number designation command are set in one timer interrupt. Sent by. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. 36, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending memory number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is an effect symbol variation start process which will be described later at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started each time the effect symbol variation display is started. In step S8022, the contents stored in the first storage area 1 are deleted and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 36, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4.

  In addition, in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36, the storage area 2 shows an example in which the command reception cannot be performed normally and the total pending storage number designation command is missed. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 36, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the fourth storage area in which the total pending storage number designation command is originally stored is “0000 (H)”. The remaining state is shown.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a command at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command and total pending storage number stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. On the basis of the designation command), the setting of the continuous notice effect in the prefetch notice effect is performed in the prefetch notice effect determination process (see step S800A), and The hold notice effect is set, but if there is a missing or inconsistent command at the time of starting prize (design designation command, variable category command, start prize designation command and combined pending memory number designation command), Until the digest display of the change of the hold memory corresponding to the command at the start winning prize Continuous announcement attraction and the pending announcement attraction set is limited. In this embodiment, the command received at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area is received during a period during which the setting of the prefetching notice effect is restricted (hereinafter also referred to as the prefetching notice setting restriction period). Thus, as shown in FIG. 36, the determination hold information indicating that the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is held is reserved for the case where the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is held at the command reception timing at the start winning prize Is set. In the example shown in FIG. 36, for the storage areas 2 to 5 after the storage area 2 where the total pending storage number designation command has been missed, the value of the determination pending information indicates that the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is suspended. "Is set.

  In this embodiment, “restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect” means that the pre-reading notice effect is not set at all for the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. This includes both the concept of not executing the pre-reading notice effect and the concept of not setting and executing the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects. In this embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the hold memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting limit period, only in the case of the hold notice effect, “super reach big hit” and “super reach off” Set and not execute the continuous notice effect of the possible “Countdown” effect mode, and can be executed even when “Non-reach” is performed The continuous notice effect of the aspect can be set and executed even during the prefetch notice setting restriction period.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when a new command is stored in the start winning command storage area, the undetermined information in the storage area in which the new command is stored becomes “1”. Is set. The undetermined information is information indicating that it is not yet processed in the pre-reading notice effect determination process (see step S800A) and the hold notice effect determination process (see step S800B) described later. The undetermined information is set to “1” when a new command is received, and then the command is processed in the pre-reading notice effect determination process (see step S800A), and further the hold notice effect determination process (see step S800B). When that command is processed, it is cleared to “0”. In this embodiment, the undetermined information is set to “1” when the symbol designation command is stored in step S652 if there is no missing symbol designation command.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small win is determined in the winning presentation process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 21), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654). However, if the variation category command, start winning designation command, or total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored, the variation category command will be included in the current timer interrupt. This means that the symbol designating command to be received has been missed. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and the undetermined information of the storage area. Is set to “1”.

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S656). However, if the start winning designation command or the combined pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored, the first start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In that case, the production control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and in the storage area. The undetermined information is set to “1”.

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command for each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S658). However, if the start winning designation command or the total pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variable category command is stored, the second start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and The undetermined information is set to “1”.

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660). However, if the total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command is stored, the total pending memory is stored within the current timer interrupt. This means that all of the symbol designation command, variable category command, and start winning designation command to be received prior to the number designation command have been missed. In that case, the production control CPU 101 stores the received total pending storage number designation command in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM, and in the storage area. The undetermined information is set to “1”.

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display portion 18c is updated (step S662A). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays on the combined hold storage display section 18c are lit up, the first hold display is erased when a combined hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area.

  Next, when the presentation control CPU 101 executes a hold notice effect in a mode (hold display change type) in which the hold display to be described later changes, the hold for counting the number of times the hold is consumed until the hold display is changed. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the display change counter is 0 (step S662B). If the value of the hold display change counter is not 0, the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold display change counter (step S662C), and whether or not the value of the hold display change counter after the subtraction is 0. Is confirmed (step S662D). If the value of the hold display change counter after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if it is the change timing of the hold display), the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold display subject to the notice of the hold notice effect. The mode is changed to the changed mode determined in the hold notice effect determination process (step S800B) described later (step S662E). For example, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display to be notified, from blue to red, from blue to rainbow, or from red to rainbow.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S670). The effect control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, , An orange display color background screen) (step S673). The effect control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a pre-reading notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence and effect mode of the continuous notice effect among the pre-reading notice effects (step S800A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a hold notice effect determining process for determining the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the effect mode of the pre-read notice effects (step S800B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbols is realized. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  38 and 39 are flowcharts showing the pre-reading notice effect determination process (step S800A). In the pre-reading notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 (step S6001). ). If there is no storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”, the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”, the production control CPU 101 sets a command stored in the storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” as a processing target, It is checked whether or not any pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that a continuous notice effect among the pre-reading notice effects is already being executed is set (step S6002). The pre-reading notice execution flag is set in steps S6015, S6023, and S8012, which will be described later. If any pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the process returns to step S6001 without proceeding to step S6003.

  Note that, by executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, the process of determining the continuous notice effect is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not being executed. Since the pre-reading notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the determination process of the continuous notice effect again. The In addition, if a super-reach or a winning prize that is a big hit occurs while running a continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning a “non-reach”, the super-reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed. Note that the process of determining whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag is present in step S6002 may not be provided, and the processes after step S6003 may be executed regardless of whether or not the continuous notice effect is being executed.

  If no pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a pre-reading notice setting restriction flag indicating that the prefetch notice setting restriction period is set (step S6003). If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not there is one in which the determination hold information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Step S6004). If there is no information whose determination suspension information is “1”, the process proceeds to step S6001. If there is one whose determination hold information is “1”, the production control CPU 101 sets the determination hold information of the storage area in which the current command to be processed is set to “1” (Step 1). S6005), the process proceeds to step S6001. That is, during the pre-reading notice setting restriction period, the execution of the continuous notice effect is restricted so as not to proceed to the process for setting the continuous notice effect in steps S6006 to S6016.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the current command to be processed at the start winning prize, and determines whether all the commands at the start winning prize have been received in order. Confirmation is made (step S6006).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) in the start winning command storage area. , And a command “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command has been missed due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data and the command could not be received correctly. .

  In this embodiment, since the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, the MODE data is “ It should be stored in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. It can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of it is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the contents of the current design target symbol designating command and the variation category command match. (Step S6007). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, when the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a conflict.

  If it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command match, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the start winning designation command to be processed and the total pending storage number designation command. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6008). Specifically, the first start winning designation command for designating that the first winning prize opening 13 has been received and the second starting prize for designating that the second winning prize opening 14 has been given. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are inconsistent and inconsistent.

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6006 to S6008 is determined to be N, the process proceeds to step S6017 to shift to the pre-reading notice effect setting limit period. However, this is not the only case. For example, on condition that any two of the determination processes in steps S6006 to S6008 are determined to be N, the process may proceed to step S6017 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period. On the condition that it is determined as N in all the determination processes in S6008, the process may proceed to step S6017 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide all three determination processes in steps S6006 to S6008 in the program, and the program may be configured to provide only one determination process in steps S6006 to S6008. However, the program may be configured to provide only any two of the determination processes in steps S6006 to S6008.

  If it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6017. When it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command match, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area. Based on each of the extracted variation category commands, all variation category commands stored as winning determination results for the previous winning prize are variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H), non-reach CA2-1 designation). (Step S6009). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S6010. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6001 without executing the processing of steps S6010 to S6016.

  By executing the processing of step S6009, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is provided on the condition that all the fluctuation displays until the notice of the fluctuation display to be noticed are all “non-reach”. Configured to be executable. Such a configuration prevents a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect. This also applies to the processing of steps S6018 and S8007 described later. It should be noted that a determination process is not provided for determining whether or not all the variation displays up to the advance notice target in step S6009 are of the change category 1, and whether or not all the change displays up to the advance notice target are “non-reach”. Instead, the processing after step S6010 may be executed.

  If all the variation category 1 commands are determined in step S6009, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6010). If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetch notice allocation table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6011). If the high probability state flag is set, the production control CPU 101 selects the prefetch notice allocation table B (step S6012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a pre-reading notice effect mode determination random number for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, and determines the extracted prefetch notice effect mode based on the current variation category command to be processed. By determining which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in steps S6011 and S6012 matches the random number value, the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6013). .

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prefetching notice allocation table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 101 for effect control is indicated by the received variable category command using the prefetching notice allocation table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 40A selected in step S6011. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table A, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type with a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). When the winning determination result indicating that “non-reach is not included” is shown (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received), FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode shift”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). (In other words, when command C607 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 40 (A), one of the effect modes of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode shift” It is decided to execute the continuous notice effect. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). (In other words, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “countdown”.

  In addition, the specific content of the production | presentation aspect of each continuous notice effect of "change of the change form at the time of a symbol change", "mode transfer", and "countdown" is mentioned later.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-reading notice allocation table B in the probable change state shown in FIG. 40B selected in step S6012 to receive the received variation category command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type indicated by. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table B, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 40 (B) in the case where the determination result at the time of winning indicating that “there is a non-reach” (specifically, when the command C60A (H) has been received) is indicated. As shown in FIG. 4, it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice effect is not executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when command C609 (H) or command C60B (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” continues. Decide to execute the notice effect. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). (In other words, when command C612 (H) or command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 40 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “countdown” It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, the variation category command is used to determine whether the variation pattern type is a “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, or “super reach big hit” as a result of determination at the time of winning the variation pattern type. When the result is shown, the continuous notice effect may be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is selected only when the determination result at the time of winning is “super reach big hit”. Is done. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is executed in the “countdown” effect mode, it is determined that at least the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In step S6013, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to decide not to forcibly execute the continuous notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. The same applies to steps S6021 and S8010 described later.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game. For example, it is not the timing at which a start win occurs and the command at the time of the start win is received, but in a specific round (for example, 10 rounds) in the big hit game, the symbol designation command stored in the start win command storage area The category command may be read to determine whether to execute the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect may be executed in the specific round. In this case, as the pre-reading notice effect, instead of a continuous aspect effect, for example, a so-called one-notification notification effect may be executed to notify that the big hit is fixed in the variable display after the end of the big hit game. Of the pre-reading notice effects, only the hold notice effects may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6014). For example, if it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no distribution in the pre-read notice distribution tables A and B, the process proceeds to step S6001.

  When it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the execution of the continuous notice effect among the prefetch notice effects is decided according to the effect mode determined in step S6013. An executing flag is set (step S6015). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 1 command shown in FIG. Based on the result, the pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the variation category 8 command, the variation category 10 command, and the variation category 12 command shown in FIG. When “super reach is lost”, a reach pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 23 command or the variable category 26 command shown in FIG. Then, a jackpot pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set.

  In this embodiment, the missed prefetching notice execution flag, the reach prefetching notice execution flag, and the jackpot prefetching notice execution flag are collectively referred to as a prefetching notice execution flag.

  In step S6015, a pre-reading notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6013 is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, and a flag indicating “countdown” are set. It may be. Also, for example, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which presentation mode is set in a predetermined bit of the pre-reading notice execution flag. By which, it may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the current total number of pending storages in the variation counter (step S6016). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number specified by the current processing target total pending storage number designation command in the variation counter. The variation counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed until the variation display that is the determination target of the continuous notice effect is started. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed during the change display of the effect symbol and the change counter is set in step S6016 or step S6024, which will be described later, the change is first executed. At the end of the fluctuation display, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312), and as a result, the value of the fluctuation counter is changed up to the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display subject to the winning determination. It becomes 0 and the continuous notice effect ends. In step S6016 or step S6024 described later, when the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 101 may set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to always end the continuous notice effect until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect unduly unnatural.

  In the look-ahead notice allocation table shown in FIG. 40, the allocation is performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode differs according to the reliability that is a big hit. For example, each production mode is allocated so that the reliability that becomes a big hit becomes higher in the order of “change of the variation form at the time of symbol change” and “mode shift” (for example, 20% and 40% in order). (In the case of “countdown”, the big hit is fixed). In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability of the big hit is not limited to such an order. For example, the big hits are in the order of “mode shift” in the reverse order and “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change”. Allocation may be performed so that the reliability becomes higher.

  When the variation counter is set in step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and checks whether there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. To do. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  Specifically, as already described, when a game ball starts and wins at the same time in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, the symbol designation command for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. , A command set of a variable category command, a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command, a symbol designation command for a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a variable category command, a second start winning designation command and a sum A total of 8 commands including the command set of the reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted in one timer interrupt. In this case, two sets of start in the start winning command storage area in one timer interrupt The command at the time of winning is stored, and the undetermined information is set to “1” respectively. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the undetermined information sequentially from the storage area of the start winning command storage area in ascending order of the area number, and the undetermined information is “1”. The processing after step S6002 is executed with the command stored in the first storage area as the processing target. Next, when returning to step S6001, since the undetermined information of the next storage area is also “1”, the undetermined information is stored in the second storage area of “1”. The process after step S6002 is executed with the command to be processed. In other words, when a game ball starts and wins at the same time in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, in the pre-reading notice effect determination processing in step S800A, two sets of start winning times are received within one timer interruption. Processing for determining the presence / absence and mode of the continuous notice effect for the command is performed.

  When the process moves to step S6017, it is a case where a command at the time of start winning is missed or mismatched and the command at the start winning cannot be received normally. In this case, the production control CPU 101 confirms the current command to be processed, and has received at least a command other than the start winning designation command (that is, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the total pending storage number designation command). Whether or not is confirmed (step S6017). Specifically, the command that is missing in the storage area in which the current command to be processed is stored is only the start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command). If the design designation command, the variation category command and the combined pending storage number designation command are stored in order, and the contents of the design designation command and the variation category command are also consistent, at least three commands other than the start winning designation command ( Since the symbol designation command, variation category command, and total pending storage number designation command) can be received, there is a possibility that a certain level of credibility can be secured. If any command other than the start winning designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S6025.

  When it is determined that at least a command other than the start winning designation command is received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and extracts each extracted variation category. Based on the command, it is determined whether or not all of the variable category commands stored as the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the previous start winning are the variable category 1 commands (command C600 (H), non-reach CA2-1 designation). Confirmation is made (step S6018). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S6019. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6025 without executing the processing of steps S6019 to S6024.

  If all of them are variable category 1 commands in step S6018, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6019). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6025. If the high-probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the pre-reading notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6020).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a pre-reading notice effect mode determination random number for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, and determines the extracted prefetch notice effect mode based on the current variation category command to be processed. By determining which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in step S6020 matches the random number value, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step S6021).

  In step S6021, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-reading notice allocation table C at the time of abnormal command reception shown in FIG. 40C selected in step S6020 to determine the variation pattern type indicated by the received variation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, the production mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table C, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 40 (C) only when the determination result at the time of winning indicating that “non-reach is not included” is indicated (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received). As shown in the figure, it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of either “change of the variation pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode shift”, and “ In such a case, the continuous notice effect is not executed. In other words, in this embodiment, if any of the commands at the time of starting winning a prize cannot be received normally, it is possible to execute “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “execution of non-reach” or Only the continuous notice effect (the so-called “gase continuous notice effect”) of the “mode shift” effect mode can be executed, and the execution frequency of the continuous notice effect is prevented from being lowered more than necessary. In addition, it is not executed only in the case of “non-reach out”, but for example, in the case of “out of super reach” or “super reach big hit”, the continuous notice effect can be executed at a low rate. Allocation may be performed. In such a case, when a continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change of pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode transition” is executed, it is not necessarily determined that it is “non-reach”. can do.

  In this embodiment, even if any command at the time of the start winning prize is not received normally, if a command other than the start winning designation command is received, only the so-called continuous warning effect of the so-called Gasse is received. Although the case where it is configured to be executable is shown, the processing of steps S6017 to S6024 is not executed, and if any of the start winning commands cannot be received normally, setting and execution of the continuous notice effect You may comprise so that it may not perform at all. In particular, it is specified by a command that any one of the commands at the time of starting winning (design designation command, variation category command, starting winning designation command, combined pending storage number designation command) could not be received normally. Since it is considered that the credibility of the information is low, it is most desirable to configure not to execute the continuous notice effect of all the effect modes in the prefetch notice setting restriction period (the processing in steps S8006 to S8014 described later is not performed). Is desirable).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6022). For example, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no assignment in the prefetch notice distribution table C, the process proceeds to step S6025.

  When it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided according to the effect mode determined in step S6021. (Step S6023).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the current total pending storage number in the variation counter (step S6024). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number specified by the current processing target total pending storage number designation command in the variation counter. Then, control goes to a step S6026.

  In step S6025, the effect control CPU 101 sets the determination hold information in the storage area for storing the command to be currently processed in the start winning command storage area (step S6025). Specifically, in FIG. 36, the value of the determination pending information in the storage area that stores the current command to be processed is set to “1”.

  In step S6026, the CPU 101 for production control displays all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c from a normal display form (for example, a green round display). Change to (round display). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 changes all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c to the hold display in a missed manner. Note that the hold display in the missed mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the hold display may be changed to a color other than gray (for example, yellow), and the shape of the hold display is changed. (For example, the hold display may be changed to a triangle display or the like).

  In this embodiment, when a command is missed or inconsistent at the time of a start winning prize is shown, all pending displays displayed on the total pending storage display unit 18c are changed. Only the hold display for the hold storage that has been missed or inconsistent is displayed in a drop-off mode, and the previous display mode is the normal display mode (if the hold-prediction effect is being executed, Display mode) may be continued. In addition, after a command is missed or inconsistent, during the pre-reading notice setting limit period, the pending display may be displayed in the missed mode for the pending storage that has occurred or displayed in the normal display mode. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetch notice setting restriction flag (step S6027), and starts a prefetch notice setting restriction period.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is already being executed (see Y in step S6002), the process proceeds to step S6001, and the command missing or inconsistency determination after step S6006 is not performed. However, even when the continuous notice effect is being executed, the same processing as in steps S6006 to S6008 is executed to determine whether or not a command is missed or inconsistency occurs. If it is determined that there is a match, the same process as step S6027 may be executed to set the prefetch notice setting restriction flag and start the prefetch notice setting restriction period. Alternatively, the same processing as that in step S6026 may be executed to change all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c to a missing form.

  Even after setting the prefetch notice setting restriction flag in step S6027, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6001 and there is still a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Confirm whether or not to do. Then, the processes in and after step S6002 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect determination process (step S800B). In the hold notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 (step S6501). ). If there is no storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”, the process is terminated as it is.

  If there is a storage area in which the undetermined information is “1”, the production control CPU 101 sets a command stored in the storage area in which the undetermined information is “1” as a processing target, It is confirmed whether or not the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set (step S6502).

  In addition, not only when the start winning command received earlier than the current timer interrupt could not be received normally, but also when the newly received start winning command was received normally with this timer interrupt. Even if not, since the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag should have been set in the pre-reading notice effect determination process (step S800A) executed immediately before, the current process target command is missed or inconsistent. Even in such a case, Y is determined in step S6502 and execution of the hold notice effect is restricted.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 extracts from the hold notice determination random number counter a hold notice determination random number for determining the presence and mode of the hold notice effect according to the total number of reserved holds. (Step S6503). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of pending notice determination random number counters are provided corresponding to the total pending stored number. That is, in this embodiment, for the total pending memory number 1, for the total pending memory number 2, for the total pending memory number 3, for the total pending memory number 4, for the total pending memory number 5, for the total pending memory number 6, A total of eight pending notice determination random number counters for the total pending storage number 7 and the total pending storage number 8 are provided. In step S6503, the production control CPU 101 first specifies the total pending storage number from the EXT data of the current processing target total pending storage number designation command, and sets a pending notice determination random number counter corresponding to the identified total pending storage number. A selection is made and a hold notice determination random number is extracted from the selected hold notice determination random number counter. For example, when the total pending storage number is specified as 1 based on the total pending storage number designation command, the pending advance notice determination random number is extracted from the pending advance notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 1. Further, for example, when the total pending storage number is specified as 4 based on the total pending storage number designation command, the pending announcement determination random number is extracted from the pending announcement determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a hold notice determination table for determining the presence / absence and mode of the hold notice effect according to the combined number of reserved memories (step S6504). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of suspension notice determination tables are provided corresponding to the total number of suspension storage. That is, in this embodiment, for the total pending memory number 1, for the total pending memory number 2, for the total pending memory number 3, for the total pending memory number 4, for the total pending memory number 5, for the total pending memory number 6, A total of eight pending notice determination tables for the total pending storage number 7 and the total pending storage number 8 are provided. In step S6504, the production control CPU 101 first identifies the total pending storage number from the EXT data of the current processing target total pending storage number designation command, and selects a pending notice determination table corresponding to the identified total pending storage number. To do. For example, when the total pending storage count is specified as 1 based on the total pending storage count designation command, the pending notice determination table for the total pending storage count 1 is selected. Further, for example, when the total pending storage number is specified as 4 based on the total pending storage number designation command, the pending notice determination table for the total pending storage number 4 is selected.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control performs a lottery process using the hold notice determination random number extracted in step S6503 and the hold notice determination table selected in step S6504 based on the current variation category command to be processed, and the hold notice effect. Whether or not to execute and the production mode are determined (step S6505).

  42 to 44 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the hold notice determination table. 42A is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 1, and FIG. 42B is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 2. FIG. 42C is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 3, and FIG. 43D is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 4. 43 (E) is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 5, FIG. 43 (F) is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 6, and FIG. G) is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the combined hold storage number 7, and FIG. 44 (H) is a specific example of the hold notice determination table for the combined hold storage number 8.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, each hold notice determination table includes no hold notice effect, hold notice effect (blue), hold notice effect (red), hold notice effect (rainbow), hold notice effect (blue → A determination value is assigned to each of the reserved notice effect (red → rainbow) and the reserved notice effect (red → rainbow). The hold notice effect (blue) is a hold notice effect in a form in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a blue round display. Moreover, the hold notice effect (red) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a red round display. Also, the hold notice effect (rainbow) is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the notice target hold display is displayed in a rainbow-colored round display.

  In addition, the hold notice effect (blue → red) starts the display of the notice target hold display in a blue circle, and then displays any hold display that has been displayed before the notice target hold display. This is a hold notice effect in which the notice display is changed from blue to red rounded at the time when the notice is consumed. In addition, the hold notice effect (blue → rainbow) starts displaying the hold display of the notice object in a blue circle display, and then displays any hold display that has been displayed before the hold display of the notice object. This is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the hold display to be notified is changed from blue to a rainbow-colored round display at the timing when is digested. In addition, the hold notice effect (red → rainbow) starts displaying the hold display of the notice object in a red round display, and then displays any hold display that is displayed before the notice object hold display. This is a hold notice effect in a mode in which the hold display to be notified is changed from red to a rainbow-colored round display at the timing when is digested.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, in each hold notice determination table, when it is specified that the change pattern type is a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type (specifically, command C600 (H )), When it is specified by the variation category command that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 (specifically, when command C607 (H) is received), and variation category The determination value is assigned only when it is specified that the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3 is specified by the command (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received). . Therefore, in this embodiment, as in the case of the continuous notice effect, the hold notice effect can be executed only when the non-reach is lost, the super reach is lost, or the super reach is a big hit.

  In addition, not only the aspect shown by this embodiment, you may comprise so that non-reach out, super reach out, and a change notice category other than super reach big hit may be performed. In this case, for example, it may be configured to specify only whether or not to win a big hit based on the variable category command and to execute the hold notice effect according to the specification result.

  As shown in FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, in this embodiment, with respect to the hold notice effect (blue → rainbow) and the hold notice effect (red → rainbow), a determination value is assigned only when a super reach jackpot is reached. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the hold notice effect is executed in such a manner that the notice target hold display starts with a blue or red round display and then changes to a rainbow-colored round display, Will be confirmed.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, in this embodiment, regarding the hold notice effect (red), the hold notice effect (rainbow), and the hold notice effect (blue → red), superreach is lost or superreach. A judgment value is assigned only when it is a big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed in a mode in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a red or rainbow-colored round display, or the hold display of the notice target is a blue round display. After the start, when the hold notice effect is executed in a manner of changing to a red round display, it is determined that the super reach is achieved.

  In this embodiment, since the case where the hold notice effect (blue → rainbow) and the hold notice effect (red → rainbow) are executed is determined as a big hit, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is 100%. highest. Further, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit of the hold notice effect (blue → red) is high next, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit of the hold notice effect (rainbow) next. The judgment value is assigned so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit of the hold notice effect (red) is high and the expectation (reliability) for the big notice of the hold notice effect (blue) is the lowest. It is.

  In the hold notice determination table for the sum hold memory number 1 shown in FIG. 42 (A), there is only one sum hold memory number. Is digested at the start of the next variable display, and there is no room to change the mode of the hold display of the notice target after starting the hold notice effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), in the hold notice determination table for the combined hold memory number 1, the hold notice effect (blue → red), the hold notice effect (blue → rainbow), and the hold notice effect (red → No decision value is assigned to (Rainbow).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, in this embodiment, the presence / absence of the hold notice effect is determined and the mode of the hold notice effect is also determined collectively by a lottery process using one random number. However, the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the form of the hold notice effect may be determined in two stages by a lottery process using different random numbers. That is, first, only the presence or absence of the hold notice effect is determined by the lottery process using one random number, and when it is decided to execute the hold notice effect, the aspect of the hold notice effect is further determined by the lottery process using another random number. May be determined.

  In step S6505, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to decide not to forcibly execute the hold notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game.

  When it is determined to execute the hold notice effect in any manner (Y in step S6506), the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold indication in the sum hold storage display unit 18c in the decided hold notice effect aspect. Increase by one (step S6507). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control increases the blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display by one as the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c according to the determination result of step S6505, and holds the hold notice. Start production. When step S6507 is executed and the hold notice effect is started, the display position of the notice target hold display is shifted one by one as the variable display is started and the hold display is digested one by one. Eventually, the hold notice effect is ended by digesting the hold display for the advance notice and deleting it from the hold storage display section 18c (see steps S661 and S662A).

  In this embodiment, the display of the hold display in the normal mode is expressed as the normal display, and the display of the hold display in the hold notice effect mode is displayed as the special display. There is also a case.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hold notice change effect type in which the hold display mode changes in the middle is determined as the hold notice effect mode (step S6508). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hold notice effect (blue → red), the hold notice effect (blue → rainbow), or the hold notice effect (red → rainbow) has been determined. . If it is not the hold display change type, the process proceeds to step S6515.

  In the case of determining the hold notice change effect of the hold display change type, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of times the hold is consumed until the hold indication of the notice target in the hold notice effect is changed according to the combined hold memory number. The hold display change count determination random number for determination is extracted from the hold display change count determination random number counter (step S6509). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of hold display change count determination random number counters are provided corresponding to the total hold storage number. That is, in this embodiment, for the total pending memory number 2, for the total pending memory number 3, for the total pending memory number 4, for the total pending memory number 5, for the total pending memory number 6, for the total pending memory number 7, In addition, a total of seven hold display change frequency determination random number counters for the total hold memory number 8 are provided. In step S6509, the production control CPU 101 first identifies the total pending storage number from the EXT data of the current total pending storage number designation command to be processed, and determines the pending display change count determination random number corresponding to the identified total pending storage number. A counter is selected, and a hold display change count determination random number is extracted from the selected hold display change count determination random number counter. For example, when the total pending storage count is specified as 1 based on the total pending storage count designation command, the pending display change count determination random number is extracted from the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage count 1. Further, for example, when the total pending storage number is specified as 4 based on the total pending storage number designation command, the pending display change count determination random number is extracted from the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage count 4 .

  Next, the production control CPU 101 selects a hold display change count determination table for determining the number of times the hold is consumed until the hold display of the notice target in the hold notice effect is changed according to the combined hold storage number (steps). S6510). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of hold display change count determination tables are provided corresponding to the total hold storage count. That is, in this embodiment, for the total pending memory number 2, for the total pending memory number 3, for the total pending memory number 4, for the total pending memory number 5, for the total pending memory number 6, for the total pending memory number 7, In addition, a total of seven hold display change times determination tables for the total hold memory number 8 are provided. In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 1, there is no room for determination of the on-hold notification effect of the mode of change of the display type for holding (see FIG. 42 (A)), so the display for holding for the total number of stored storage 1 is held. There is no change count determination table. In step S6510, the effect control CPU 101 first identifies the total pending storage count from the EXT data of the current total pending storage count designation command to be processed, and determines the pending display change count determination table corresponding to the identified total pending storage count. Select. For example, when the total pending storage count is specified as 1 based on the total pending storage count designation command, the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage count 1 is selected. Further, for example, when the total pending storage count is specified as 4 based on the total pending storage count designation command, the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage count 4 is selected.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs a lottery process using the hold display change frequency determination random number extracted in step S6509 and the hold display change frequency determination table selected in step S6510, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the hold notice effect. The number of on-hold digestion (the number of on-hold display changes) until it is made is determined (step S6511).

  45 and 46 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the hold display change count determination table. 45A is a specific example of the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage count 2 and FIG. 45B is an example of the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage count 3. FIG. 45C is a specific example, and FIG. 45D is a specific example of the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage count 4, and FIG. 45D is the pending display change count determination for the total pending storage count 5. FIG. 46E is a specific example of the table, FIG. 46E is a specific example of the pending display change count determination table for the total pending storage number 6, and FIG. 46F is the pending display change for the total pending storage number 7. FIG. 46G is a specific example of the number-of-times determination table, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the total pending storage number is 2, there is no room for changing the mode of the pending display only at the timing when the pending display is completed when the next variable display is started. Then, it is decided to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested by the next change. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the total pending storage number is 3, the pending display is performed at the timing when the pending is consumed when the next variation display or the second variation display is started. Since it is possible to change the mode of the display, it is determined to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested at the next change or the second change. Also, as shown in FIG. 45C, when the total number of pending storage is 4, the hold is made when the next variation display, the second variation display, or the third variation display is started. Since it is possible to change the mode of the hold display at the time when the hold is digested, it is decided to change the mode of the hold display at the timing at which the hold is digested at the next variation, the second variation, or the third variation. . As shown in FIG. 45D, when the total number of pending storages is 5, the next variation display, the second variation display, the third variation display, or the fourth variation display. Since it is possible to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested when the start is started, at the timing when the hold is digested at any of the second, second, third or fourth change It is decided to change the mode of the hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 46E, when the total number of pending storage is 6, the next variation display, the second variation display, the third variation display, the fourth variation display, Alternatively, since the hold display mode can be changed at the timing when the hold is exhausted when the fifth change display is started, the next change, the second change, the third change, the fourth change, or the fifth change It is decided to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested. As shown in FIG. 46 (F), when the total pending storage number is 7, the next variation display, the second variation display, the third variation display, the fourth variation display, Since it is possible to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is consumed when the fifth change display or the sixth change display is started, the next change, the second change, the third change, It is decided to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested at the fourth change, the fifth change, or the sixth change. Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (G), when the total number of pending storage is 8, the next variation display, the second variation display, the third variation display, the fourth variation display, Since the hold display can be changed at the timing when the hold is consumed when the fifth change display, the sixth change display, or the seventh change display is started, the next change, 2 It is decided to change the mode of the hold display at the timing when the hold is digested at any one of the third change, the third change, the fourth change, the fifth change, the sixth change, or the seventh change.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 45 and 46 show the case where the determination values are generally allocated equally, but not limited to those shown in this embodiment, A separate hold display change count determination table for losing is provided, and the judgment value is assigned so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit becomes higher as the timing of the change of the hold display mode is delayed. Also good. Conversely, the determination value may be allocated so that the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit increases as the timing at which the hold display mode changes is earlier.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the hold display change count determined in step S6511 in the hold display change counter (step S6512). Further, the production control CPU 101 stores the display position of the hold display to be notified in the storage area provided in the RAM, and also stores the changed hold display mode determined in step S6505 (step S6513). It should be noted that the display position of the hold display for the advance notice stored in step S6513 is updated so as to be shifted one by one, for example, in the process of step S662A every time the change display is started and the hold display is consumed. Shall.

  In addition, after the processing of steps S6508 to S6513 is executed, the value of the hold display change counter set in step S6512 is decremented by 1 each time the change display is started and the hold display is consumed (see step S662C). ) When the value of the hold display change counter becomes 0, the hold display to be notified changes to the changed mode stored in step S6513 (see steps S662D and S662E). Specifically, the hold display subject to notice changes from a blue round display to a red round display, from a blue round display to a rainbow-colored round display, or from a red round display. Changes to a rainbow-colored round display.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect with a plurality of hold indications displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c as a notice subject, and a change of the hold indication with a plurality of hold indications as a notice subject. It is also possible to execute a hold notice effect of a type aspect. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of hold display change counters, and when a hold notice change effect of a hold display change type is executed for a plurality of hold displays as a notice target, in step S6512. It is possible to individually manage the timing of changing the display mode for each hold display to be notified by setting the hold display change counter individually for each hold display to be notified and executing the processing of steps S662B to S662E. It is.

  When the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set (Y in step S6502) or when it is decided not to execute the holding notice effect (N in step S6506), the effect control CPU 101 is in a normal mode. The pending display is incremented by one in the total pending storage display unit 18c (step S6514). Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control increases the green round display by one as the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c.

  In this embodiment, the case where the hold display is increased in the same manner is shown without distinguishing between the case where the first winning prize opening 13 is won and the case where the second starting prize opening 14 is won. However, the hold display may be displayed so that it can be distinguished whether the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning or the second starting winning opening 14 is a starting winning. For example, a green round display is displayed as a hold display when a start winning is made at the first start winning opening 13, whereas a yellow circle is displayed as a hold display when a start winning is made at the second start winning opening 14. A shape display may be displayed. Further, for example, when a start winning is made at the first start winning opening 13, a round display is displayed as a hold display, whereas when a start winning is made at the second start winning opening 14, a rectangular display is displayed as a holding display. The shape of the hold display may be varied, such as displaying.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears the undetermined information in the current processing target command storage area in the start winning command storage area, and sets the value of the undetermined information to 0 (step S6515).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 returns to step S6501 and checks whether or not there is still a storage area where the undetermined information is “1” in the start winning command storage area. Then, the processes in and after step S6502 are repeatedly executed until the process is completed for the commands stored in all storage areas in which the undetermined information is “1”.

  Specifically, as already described, when a game ball starts and wins at the same time in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, the symbol designation command for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. , A command set of a variable category command, a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command, a symbol designation command for a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a variable category command, a second start winning designation command and a sum A total of 8 commands including the command set of the reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted in one timer interrupt. In this case, two sets of start in the start winning command storage area in one timer interrupt The command at the time of winning is stored, and the undetermined information is set to “1” respectively. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the undetermined information sequentially from the storage area of the start winning command storage area in ascending order of the area number, and the undetermined information is “1”. The command stored in the first storage area is set as the processing target, and the processing from step S6502 is executed. When the processing is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. Next, when returning to step S6501, since the undetermined information of the next storage area is also “1”, the undetermined information is stored in the second storage area of “1”. The process after step S6502 is executed with the command to be processed as the processing target, and when the process is completed, the undetermined information is cleared to “0”. In other words, when a game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 at the same time, two sets of start wins are received within one timer interruption in the hold notice effect determining process in step S800B. Processing for determining the presence / absence and mode of the hold notice effect for the command is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the continuous notice effect is being executed or when it is determined to be executed, the case where the hold notice effect is configured to be executed in parallel is shown. You may comprise so that a notice effect may not be performed in parallel. In this case, for example, as in step S6002 of the pre-reading notice effect determination process (see step S800A), whether or not any pre-reading notice execution flag is set is also checked in the hold notice effect determination process. If any of the pre-reading notice execution flags is set, the process may not be performed after step S6502 and the holding notice effect may not be executed.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is recovered (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set (step S8000). If the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period), the process proceeds to step S8015.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the pre-fetching notice setting restriction period), the production control CPU 101 displays the contents of the command at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area. Confirmation is made (step S8001). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S8002).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, if commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, The commands “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) and “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state in which a command is lost due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data. , It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the design designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, all the storage areas 1 to 1 in the start prize command storage area 8, if the command is stored, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Are stored in the order of "." Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. In other words, it can be determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If the received storage start area for which it is determined that the command at the time of the start winning prize is not in order or is partially missing still remains, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state where all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storing area at the starting winning prize. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command are consistent (step S8003). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, if the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 stores the command in the start winning prize command storage area. In all the storage areas 1-8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent (step S8004). Specifically, the first start winning designation command for designating that the first winning prize opening 13 has been received and the second starting prize for designating that the second winning prize opening 14 has been given. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are not consistent and there is still a storage area in a storage state having a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. In the case where it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent in all the storage areas 1 to 8, the production control CPU 101 restricts the pre-reading advance notice setting. The flag is reset (step S8005). That is, since all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area are in a storage state in which the start winning command has been normally received, the command that triggered the start of the pre-reading notice setting limit period It is determined that the pending storage that has been missed or inconsistent has been consumed, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is reset at the timing when the variable display is started when the pending storage where the command is missed or inconsistency is consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is set. This is not limited to this timing. For example, the pre-reading notice setting limit period ends at the timing when the variable display is terminated when the pending memory that has been missed or inconsistent is exhausted. You may make it do. In this case, for example, the same process as steps S8000 to S8005 may be performed in the effect symbol variation stop process to be described later, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag may be reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period may be terminated.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is any of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area where the value of the determination suspension information is set to “1” (step S8006). ). If there is one for which the value of the determination hold information is set to “1” (that is, if there is a pre-read notice effect setting process that has not been executed in the hold memory generated during the pre-read notice setting restriction period) The process proceeds to step S8007. If there is no determination hold information value set to “1”, the process proceeds to step S8015.

  In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of storage areas in which the value of determination hold information is set to “1” in the start winning command storage area, the most recently stored storage ( The processing of steps S8007 to S8013 is performed for the command at the time of starting winning for (holding memory corresponding to the last winning winning), and the setting process of the prefetching notice effect for the holding memory generated during the prefetching notice setting restriction period Shall be performed retroactively. For all commands stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the determination hold information is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8007 to S8013 can be performed to set the prefetching notice effect retroactively. You may make it determine whether it exists.

  If there is one for which the value of the determination hold information is set to “1”, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variable category commands from the storage area in which the commands are stored before the undetermined storage area. Then, based on each extracted variation category command, all the variation category commands stored as winning determination results with respect to the start winning up to the previous storage area that has not been determined are the variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H)). Whether or not non-reach CA2-1 is specified) is confirmed (step S8007). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S8008. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S8014 without executing the processing of steps S8008 to S8013.

  If all of them are variable category 1 commands in step S8007, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S8008). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8014. If the high-probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the pre-reading notice allocation table D as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S8009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the continuous notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the pre-reading notice allocation table selected in step S8009 matches the execution status of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode (step S8010).

  In step S8010, the production control CPU 101 uses the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction shown in FIG. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table D, for example, the effect control CPU 101 uses the change category command to change to the non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). (When the command C600 (H) is received), or when the variable category command is used, the super CA2 is displayed. When the winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is −7 (that is, “becomes super-reach”) (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received) When winning a prize indicating that the variation category type is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”). When a constant result is indicated (specifically, when command C612 (H) or command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. It is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change of” or “mode shift”.

  Note that, for example, the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is a continuous notice effect that counts down in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays, and the pending storage that has not been determined when the prefetching notice setting restriction period is released If it is executed retroactively, an unnatural effect such that the countdown starts from the change display in the middle is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), in this embodiment, the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of canceling the prefetching notice setting restriction is allocated to the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode. The continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is not retroactively executed. That is, the continuous notice effect of the continuous effect mode is not executed retroactively when the prefetch notice setting restriction period is canceled in order to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous notice effect (step S8011). For example, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no assignment in the prefetch notice distribution table D, the process proceeds to step S8014.

  When it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined according to the effect mode determined in step S8010. (Step S8012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives a command set at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command) received before the command to be determined for the continuous notice effect and stored in the start winning command storage area. , The number of start winning designation commands and the combination pending storage number designation command) is identified, and the identified number (that is, the number of variation displays up to the previous one of the variation display to be notified) is set in the variation counter. (Step S8013).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the values of the determination suspension information in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area to “0” (step S8014).

  In this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a continuous notice effect is configured and executable retroactively to pending storage that has not been determined when the prefetching notice setting restriction period is released, but the prefetching notice setting restriction period is released. Alternatively, the continuous notice effect may not be set and executed retroactively to the undetermined hold storage. In this case, specifically, after the process of step S8005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S8015 as it is, and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 are not executed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a storage area for setting determination hold information in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8015). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8016). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8016, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8016. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined in step S8016 that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance eye symbol is used as the stop symbol of the production symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8016, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2). In the case of a command, a display result 3 designation command, or a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased, and in the case of “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol in which 3 symbols were equal in the same even number design.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that is reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the look-ahead notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect blade role, etc.) (Notice announcement effect.) Is executed or a notice effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8017).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the prefetching notice effect and other notice effects when executing the variation pattern, the prefetch notice effect, and other notice effects (step S8018). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8019).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 51 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect or other notice effects, and when the pre-reading notice execution flag or other notice execution flag is set, the prefetching is performed in step S8018. A process table corresponding to the notice effect or other notice effects is selected.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S8020). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8021). Next, the production control CPU 101 uses a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command, and so on) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning command storage area. (Total pending storage number designation command) is deleted, and the content of the command storage area at the start winning prize is shifted (step S8022).

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the prefetching notice effect is configured to be restartable from the next fluctuation display after digesting the fluctuation display that caused the command miss and inconsistency and caused the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Although, for example, the shift process of step S8022 is executed after it is determined as Y in step S811 of the variation pattern command reception waiting process, a command is missed or an inconsistency causes a prefetching notice setting limit period. The pre-reading notice effect may be configured to be restartable from the changed display. In this case, for example, if the change display that caused the missed-out command or inconsistency and caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is “non-reach”, it caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in the variable display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8023).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any pre-reading notice execution flag is set (step S8106). If any of the pre-reading notice execution flags is set, the CPU 101 for effect control “changes the variation mode at the time of symbol change” according to the effect mode determined in the pre-reading notice effect mode determination process in steps S6013, S6021, and S8010. ”,“ Mode shift ”, or“ countdown ”, control is performed to execute a pre-reading notice effect (specifically, a continuous notice effect) (step S8108). In addition, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect, specifically, the continuous notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the effect symbol. The Further, when executing the continuous notice effect, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the continuous notice effect, and the process of step S8108 is executed. Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8106 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8108 is executed.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, since the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither big win nor small win is made (N in step S8303), the production control CPU 101 determines whether any pre-reading notice execution flag is set (step S8303). S8311). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set pre-reading notice execution flag (step S8316). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is executed until the display of the change one time before the start of the change subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the determination at the time of winning is determined. The pre-reading notice execution flag is reset at the start of the target variation display (the continuous notice effect is not performed during the variation display targeted for the winning determination). Note that the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8317). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 47, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8318).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round processing (step S805) (step S1910).

  It should be noted that, in addition to the process for displaying a big hit, a process for displaying a small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the confirmation of reception of the ending command, for example, during the round process (see step S805).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as the production parts, the speaker 27 as the production parts, and the movable member 78 and the production blade accessories 79a and 79b as the production parts are controlled (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884). When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  56 to 58 are flowcharts showing the random number update process (step S707) in the effect control process. 56 to 58 show a process of updating the hold notice determination random number and the hold display change count determination random number among the processes executed in the random number update process. In the processing, various random numbers such as a random number for determining the stop symbol or temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol and a random number for determining various effects such as the notice effect are updated.

  In the random number update processing, the effect control CPU 101 first adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 1 (step S7001). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7002). If the value of the holding notice determination random number counter for the total holding memory number 1 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7004 as it is. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the random number initial value to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1. (Step S7003).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 2 (step S7004). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2 after addition is 941 which is the maximum value (step S7005). If the value of the holding notice determination random number counter for the total holding memory number 2 is not 941, the process proceeds to step S7007 as it is. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2 is 941, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as a random number initial value to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2. (Step S7006).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 3 (step S7007). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 3 after addition is 947 which is the maximum value (step S7008). If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3 is not 947, the process proceeds to step S7010. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 3 is 947, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 3. (Step S7009).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 4 (step S7010). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 4 after addition is 953 which is the maximum value (step S7011). If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 4 is not 953, the process directly proceeds to step S7013. If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4 is 953, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4 (Step S7012).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 5 (step S7013). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 5 after addition is 967 which is the maximum value (step S7014). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 5 is not 967, the process directly proceeds to step S7016. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 5 is 967, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 5. (Step S7015).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 6 (step S7016). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6 after addition is 971 which is the maximum value (step S7017). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 6 is not 971, the process directly proceeds to step S7019. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6 is 971, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6. (Step S7018).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 7 (step S7019). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 7 after addition is 977 which is the maximum value (step S7020). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 is not 977, the process proceeds to step S7022. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 7 is 977, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 7. (Step S7021).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 8 (step S7022). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 8 after the addition is 983 which is the maximum value (step S7023). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 is not 983, the process proceeds to step S7025 as it is. If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 is 983, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number in the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 (Step S7024).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change frequency determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 2 (step S7025). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 2 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7026). If the value of the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 2 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7028. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 2 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 2. 1 is set (step S7027).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 3 (step S7028). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 3 after addition is 163, which is the maximum value (step S7029). If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3 is not 163, the process proceeds to step S7031 as it is. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3 is 163, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 3. 1 is set (step S7030).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 4 (step S7031). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained memory number 4 after addition is 167 which is the maximum value (step S7032). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4 is not 167, the process proceeds to step S7034. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 4 is 167, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 4. 1 is set (step S7033).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 5 (step S7034). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained memory number 5 after addition is 173 which is the maximum value (step S7035). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 5 is not 173, the process proceeds to step S7037 as it is. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 5 is 173, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 5. 1 is set (step S7036).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 6 (step S7037). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained memory number 6 after addition is 179 which is the maximum value (step S7038). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 6 is not 179, the process proceeds to step S7040 as it is. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 6 is 179, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 6. 1 is set (step S7039).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 7 (step S7040). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 7 after addition is 181 which is the maximum value (step S7041). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 is not 181, the process proceeds to step S7043 as it is. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 7 is 181, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 7. 1 is set (step S7042).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 8 (step S7043). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 8 after addition is 191 which is the maximum value (step S7044). If the value of the random number counter for determining the number of pending display changes for the total pending storage number 8 is not 191, the processing is terminated as it is. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 8 is 191, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 8. 1 is set (step S7045).

  As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, for the total pending storage number 5, for the total pending storage number 6 The random number counters for holding notice number 7 for the total pending storage number 7 and the total pending storage number 8 are configured such that the random number update ranges are different from each other, and the maximum value of the update range is relatively prime. Yes. For this reason, the random number values to be updated tend to vary from each other, and the random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the maximum value of the update range of each pending notice determination random number counter is a prime number different from 937, 941, 947, 953, 967, 971, 977 and 983. As shown, the values are not necessarily prime numbers as long as they are relatively prime values (that is, values that do not have a common divisor other than the initial value 1 and the maximum value).

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, for the total pending storage number 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, for the total pending storage number 5, for the total pending storage number 6, for the total pending storage The hold display change count determination random number counters for the number 7 and the sum hold storage number 8 are configured such that the random number update ranges are different from each other and the maximum values of the update ranges are relatively prime. For this reason, the random number values to be updated tend to vary from each other, and the random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the maximum value of the update range of each pending display change frequency determination random number counter is a prime number different from 157, 163, 167, 173, 179, 181 and 191. As shown, it is not necessarily a prime number as long as it is a value that is relatively prime (that is, a value that does not have a common divisor other than the initial value 1 and the maximum value).

  Further, in this embodiment, “random number update is not synchronized” means that random number update is performed by each of a plurality of random number counters (in this example, a hold notice determination random number counter and a hold display change number determination random number counter). Furthermore, it means that the update result of the random number does not satisfy a certain relationship between a certain update timing and another update timing. For example, when the update result of the random number counters A and B is 10 at a certain update timing, the update result of the random number counter A is 15 while the update result of the random number counter A is 10 at other update timings. As long as there is a difference in the random number update result, a certain relationship may not be generated. However, it is not always necessary to configure so that the update result of random numbers does not always have a fixed relationship. Even if there is a period in which a fixed relationship is temporarily generated between random number counters in the course of the update cycle, long-term It is only necessary that the random number update result is less likely to have a fixed relationship. For example, as shown in this embodiment, when the update period is the same and the maximum value of the numerical value range for updating the random number is different, the random number When updated to the value 1, until one of the random number counters is updated to the random number initial value 1 next time, the random number values are common among the random number counters, and a certain relationship is generated. However, in the long term, since the maximum value in the numerical value range of random number update is different, the random number value is shifted, so that it is difficult to make a certain relationship in the random number update result in the long term.

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the prefetch notice effect will be described. 59 to 62 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect. Among these, FIG. 59 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” among the prefetch notice effects. FIG. 60 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 61 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “countdown”. FIG. 62 shows a specific example of the production mode of the hold notice effect among the prefetch notice effects. 59 to 62, the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the example shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, the winning determination is made for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a pre-reading notice effect is shown when the game is held, but the determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the pre-reading notice effect is performed during display, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 59, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect, and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is “when symbol changes”. It is assumed that “change in variation form” is determined (see step S800A). Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 performs normal hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c based on the received first start winning designation command and combined reserved storage number designation command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6514). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 59 (1) and 59 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), the variation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 59 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 59 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 59 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed ( Step S8302). 59 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 59 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 59 (9), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Also in the case shown in FIG. 59 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 60, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 60 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and sets “mode shift” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Assume that it has been determined (see step S800A). Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 performs normal hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c based on the received first start winning designation designation command and combined pending storage number designation command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6514). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 60 (1) and 60 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 60 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the effect symbol change display, as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect of a mode in which the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 60 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 60 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 60 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 60 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 60 ( In step 7), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 60 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 60 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 60 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 60 (FIG. 60 (9)). In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 60 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 60 (9).

  In the above manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of being pushed back to the original background screen at the end of each change display, You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “countdown” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 61, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines execution of the continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect and “countdown” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 performs normal hold display on the combined hold storage display section 18c based on the received first start winning designation command and combined reserved storage number designation command. Is increased by 1 (see step S6514). Note that the count number in the “countdown” continuous notice effect may be, for example, the total number of pending storages when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined. Further, it may be configured such that a “countdown” continuous notice effect can be determined on the condition that there is a predetermined number (for example, two or more) of reserved memories that can be counted down. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 61 (1) and (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. A character string such as “Count 3!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9 and an effect is performed as if the countdown was started (see step S8108). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 61 (5), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 61 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 61 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 61 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 61 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 61 (6). A character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 61 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 61 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 61 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 61 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 61 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. A character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 61 (9), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 61 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 61 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 61 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  In the above manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of the production mode of the hold notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 62, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 62 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 decides to execute the hold notice effect as the prefetch notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command (see step S800B). Then, by determining the execution of the hold notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and the total reserved memory number designation command, In the total hold memory display unit 18c, the hold display (special display) is incremented by 1 in the determined hold notice effect mode (see step S6507), and the pre-read notice effect is immediately generated when the start prize is generated and the command at the start prize is received. To start. In this case, for example, blue, red, or iridescent red display is incremented by 1 as a special display, and the hold notice effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 62 (1) and 62 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 62 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (4), each hold display including the remaining special display is shifted one by one, and the hold notice effect continues. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 62 (5), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 62 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 62 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 62 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), each hold display including the remaining special display is shifted one by one, and the hold notice effect continues. Then, after the fluctuation time is over, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 62 (7)) is stopped (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 62 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 62 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (8), each hold display including the remaining special display is shifted one by one, and the hold notice effect continues. Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 62 (9), the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 62 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S 8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 62 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 62 (9).

  In the above manner, the hold notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Then, the hold storage effect is continued for each variable display, and the hold notification effect is continued until the hold display (special display) to be notified is deleted from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In addition, when it is determined that the hold display change type hold notice effect is executed, for example, after the hold display is started as a blue or red round display, the blue round display is changed to red. The display changes to a round display of blue, the display changes from a blue round display to a rainbow round display, or the display changes from a red round display to a rainbow round display. Is executed.

  Next, the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect will be described. 63 and 64 are explanatory diagrams showing the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect. Among these, FIG. 63 shows the execution timing of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” among the prefetch notice effects. FIG. 64 shows the execution timing of the hold notice effect in the prefetch notice effect. Note that the execution timing of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” or “countdown” is the same as the execution timing of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” shown in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the effect symbol variation display A, and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the determination result of winning determination (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is within the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice effect determination process (see step S800A) based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a continuous notice effect in the pre-reading notice effect mode determination process (see step S6013). Is determined, and “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as an effect mode of the continuous notice effect. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current total pending storage number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 63) in the variation counter (see step S6016). Thereafter, when the variation time of the variation display A is completed, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8312).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Shall. Then, the variation time of the variation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 2 (see step S8312). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, when executing the continuous notice effect of “change in the variation mode at the time of symbol variation”, a new start prize is generated during the variation display A and continuously. When it is decided to execute the notice effect, the continuous notice effect is started from the next variation display B.

  Further, when starting the next variation display C, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the variation counter value is 2, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect b (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 1 (see step S8312).

  Further, when the next variation display D is started, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the variation counter value is 1, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing the predetermined effect c (see step S8108), such as displaying an aspect in which the flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 0 (see step S8312). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the pre-reading notice execution flag that has been set based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 0 (see steps S8313 and S8316), and performs the continuous notice effect. finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the case where the continuous notice effect is performed during the variation display up to the variation display D immediately before the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning is shown. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variation display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variation display E that is the object of determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect are included in one variation display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice effect is executed even during the variable display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect in the variable display E is executed. It is only necessary to execute the super reach effect after the notice effect is finished.

  Next, the execution timing of the hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that there is a new start prize during the change display A of the effect symbol, and the determination at the time of winning is performed. Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the determination result of winning determination (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is within the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 executes the hold notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800B) and decides to execute the hold notice effect. Then, by determining the execution of the pending notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 64, receives the received start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and Based on the total reserved memory number designation command, a special display (for example, blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display) is incremented by 1 in the total reserved memory display unit 18c (see step S6507), and a start prize is generated. The hold notice effect is immediately started at the timing of receiving the command at the start winning prize.

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining special display is shifted by one, and the hold notice effect continues as shown in FIG. .

  Thereafter, each time the change display C and the change display D are started, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining special display is shifted by one. As shown in FIG. 64, the hold notice effect continues. Then, when the notice display fluctuating display D is started, the notice hold storage corresponding to the notice display fluctuating display is digested, so that the notice notice hold display (special display) is erased from the combined hold storage display section 18c. Then, as shown in FIG. 64, the hold notice effect ends.

  Next, the prefetch notice setting limit period will be described. 65 and 66 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetch notice setting limit period. Among these, FIG. 65 shows the prefetch notice setting restriction period when the start winning designation command as the stored storage information is missed. FIG. 66 shows a pre-reading notice setting restriction period when a variation category command as determination result information is missed. Note that the pre-reading notice setting limit period when the total pending storage number designation command or the symbol designation command is missed or when the received command is inconsistent is the same as in FIGS. 65 and 66.

  First, a case where the start winning designation command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 65, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the variation display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65, the production control microcomputer 100 is started for some reason (for example, due to abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption). It is assumed that the winning designation command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of starting winning a prize has not been received normally (see steps S6006 to S6008), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6027), and prefetches the advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. As shown in FIG. 65, as shown in FIG. 65, the storage area in the storage state in which the command was not correctly received at the timing of starting the variable display E for the reserved storage that caused the restriction of the prefetch notice setting. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  Next, a case where the variation category command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 66, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 66, for some reason (for example, due to an abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption), the production control microcomputer 100 changes. It is assumed that the category command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of starting winning a prize has not been received normally (see steps S6006 to S6008), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6027), and prefetches the advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. 66 (see steps S8002 to S8004), and as shown in FIG. 66, the storage area of the storage state in which the command was not correctly received at the timing of starting the variable display E for the reserved storage that caused the restriction of the prefetching advance notice setting If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 makes a pre-reading determination at the time of starting winning whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is a big hit. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the pre-reading determination result and the hold notice determination random number or the hold display change number determination random number counter extracted from the hold notice determination random number counter or the hold display change number determination random number counter. A hold notice effect is displayed in which the hold display is displayed in a mode (in this example, blue, red, or rainbow-colored round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, green round display). In addition, according to this embodiment, a plurality of hold notice determination random number counters and hold display change count determination random number counters are provided in association with the combined hold storage number. Each of the hold advance notice determination random number counter and the hold display change count determination random number counter updates the random number so as not to synchronize with the hold advance notice determination random number counter and the hold display change count determination random number counter corresponding to the other combined hold storage numbers. . For this reason, even if a start winning is made simultaneously to a plurality of start winning openings (in this example, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14) and a random number is extracted at the same timing, It is possible to extract a random number that has been updated without being synchronized with each other and execute a hold notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding notice effect from being executed in a certain combination when starting winning prizes are simultaneously given to a plurality of starting winning openings.

  For example, when a start winning is simultaneously generated at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 at a certain timing, a random number value within a certain range is read from the hold notice determination random number counter or the hold display change number determination random number counter. Then, a case is considered in which the hold display for the start winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 is displayed in the determined manner and the holding notice effect is executed. In this case, assuming that the numerical value range and the update cycle of the random number update of the hold advance notice determination random number counter and the hold display change number determination random number counter are the same and the random number update is synchronized, then the first start winning award is again at another timing. 13 and the second start winning opening 14 occur simultaneously, and when the same range of random number values are read from the hold notice determination random number counter or the hold display change number determination random number counter, the first start winning opening 13 In addition, there may be a situation in which the hold display for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is displayed in the same combination as the previous hold notice effect and the hold notice effect is executed. For example, when a simultaneous start prize is generated, a hold display for the start prize to the first start prize port 13 is displayed with a blue round display, and a hold display for the start prize to the second start prize port 14 is displayed. After the display with the red round display, when the simultaneous start winning again occurs, the hold display is displayed with the blue round display for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 There is a possibility that the hold display is displayed in a red round display for the start winning, and there is an adverse effect that the hold notice effect is easily executed in a certain combination. On the other hand, in this embodiment, each hold advance notice determination random number counter and each hold display change count determination random number counter are configured to update random numbers without synchronizing with each other in correspondence with the total number of hold storages. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the hold notice effect to be executed to be a certain combination even if the simultaneous start winning occurs.

  In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators (the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8a) are associated with each of the two start prize holes (the first start prize port 13 and the second start prize port 14). Although a case where a special symbol display 8b) is provided is shown, it may be configured so that only one special symbol display is provided as long as it has two start winning openings. In other words, regardless of whether the first winning prize opening 13 or the second starting prize opening 14 is won, the special symbol display is performed on the one special symbol display, and each start winning prize is displayed. May be configured to display a hold display or to execute a hold notice effect. Even in the case of the gaming machine configured as described above, if the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied, when the start winning is generated at the two start winning ports simultaneously, the on-hold notice effect is not executed in a certain combination. Can be.

  Although the case where the hold notice determination random number or the hold display change frequency determination random number is a software random number has been shown, a hardware random number may be used. Then, for example, a plurality of hardware random number circuits are provided corresponding to the total number of pending storage, and the update of each hardware random number is synchronized with each other by changing the clock signal frequency and the random number update cycle. You may comprise so that it may not. Further, for example, a software random number and a hardware random number may be used in combination as a hold notice determination random number or a hold display change count determination random number.

  Further, according to this embodiment, each of the hold notice determination random number counter and the hold display change number determination random number counter is a hold notice determination random number counter or a hold display change number determination random number counter corresponding to the other combined hold memory number, Update random numbers in different numerical ranges. Therefore, by changing the range of numerical values to be updated, it is possible to prevent the random numbers from being updated in synchronization with each of the hold notice determination random number counter and the hold display change frequency determination random number counter, and the hold notice effect is executed in a certain combination. Can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the maximum value of the numerical range in which each of the hold notice determination random number counters and the hold display change frequency determination random number counters updates the random number is the hold notice determination random number corresponding to the other combined hold storage number The counter and the pending display change frequency determination random number counter are relatively prime to the maximum value of the numerical value range in which the random number is updated. Therefore, the random numbers updated by the respective hold advance notice determination random number counters and the hold display change frequency determination random number counters are likely to vary, and the update of random numbers can be further prevented from being synchronized.

  In this embodiment, a case in which a total of eight pending notice determination random number counters are provided in association with each of the total pending storage numbers 1 to 8 is shown. It is not necessary to provide a holding notice determination random number counter in association with it. For example, a pending notice determination random number counter corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7 and a pending notice determination corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is even numbers 2, 4, 6, 8 The random number counter has only two pending notice determination random number counters, and the odd number hold notice decision random number counter and the even number hold notice decision random number counter differ in the numerical range and maximum value of random number update, Updates may not be synchronized. Further, for example, only two pending notice determination random number counters, ie, a hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1 and a hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2 or more, are provided for the sum hold memory number 1. The random number update may not be synchronized by changing the numerical value range or maximum value of random number update between the pending notice determination random number counter and the reservation notice determination random number counter for the total number of stored pending memories 2 or more. In addition, when considering that the hold notice effect is not likely to be a certain combination when a start winning is generated at the same time, at least when the total number of reserved holds is 2 and 3, or 3 and 4, It is desirable that the number range and maximum value of the pending notice determination random number counter be different between two consecutive summed pending stored numbers so that random number updates are not synchronized.

  Similarly, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a total of seven hold display change count determination random number counters are provided in association with each of the total hold memory numbers 2 to 8, but the total hold memory number 2 is not necessarily provided. It is not necessary to provide a random number counter for determining the number of pending display changes in association with all of .about.8, providing a random number counter for determining the number of pending display changes for odd or even numbers, or for the total pending memory number 2 or the total pending memory number 3 You may comprise so that the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the above may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where two start prize openings were provided was shown, the configuration shown in this embodiment is not limited to two, for example, a gaming machine having three or more start prize openings. It is also possible to apply. For example, even when the configuration for executing the hold notice effect shown in this embodiment is applied to a gaming machine having three start prize openings, the hold notice effect is constant when the start prize is generated at the same time. Considering the configuration so that it is difficult to be combined, at least when the total number of pending storage is 2 to 4 or 3 to 5, such as when there is a pending notice determination random number counter, It is desirable to make the update of random numbers not synchronized by changing the numerical range or maximum value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of hold notice determination random number counters and hold display change count determination random number counters are provided in association with the total hold storage number, but the first hold on the production control microcomputer 100 side. The number of memories and the number of second reserved memories can be managed, and a plurality of hold notice determination random number counters and hold display change number determination random number counters are provided in association with the first and second reserved memory numbers. May be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the update of the random numbers by the respective hold advance notice determination random number counter and the hold display change number determination random number counter is not synchronized by changing the numerical value range in which the random number is updated is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each of the hold notice determination random number counter and the hold display change frequency determination random number counter may be configured to have different update cycles for updating the random number.

  67 to 70 are flowcharts showing other processing examples of the random number update processing (step S707). In the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the production control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of each timing counter for measuring the update period of the hold notice determination random number counter and the hold display change number determination random number counter (step). S7000A-S7000G). In the examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the case where seven counters of a timing A counter to a timing G counter are provided as timing counters is shown.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 1 (step S7001). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7002). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 1 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7004A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the random number initial value to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 1. (Step S7003).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing A counter is 0 (step S7004A). If the value of the timing A counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7007A. If the value of the timing A counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 2 ( Step S7004). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7005A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 2 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7007A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as a random number initial value to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 2. (Step S7006).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing B counter is 0 (step S7007A). If the value of the timing B counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7010A. If the value of the timing B counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 3 ( Step S7007). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 3 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7008A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 3 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7010A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 3 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 3. (Step S7009).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing C counter is 0 (step S7010A). If the value of the timing C counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7013A. If the value of the timing C counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 4 ( Step S7010). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 4 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7011A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7013A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 4 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 4. (Step S7012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing D counter is 0 (step S7013A). If the value of the timing D counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7016A. If the value of the timing D counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 5 ( Step S7013). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the added hold memory number 5 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7014A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 5 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7016A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 5 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the random number initial value to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 5. (Step S7015).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing E counter is 0 (step S7016A). If the value of the timing E counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7019A. If the value of the timing E counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 6 ( Step S7016). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7017A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 6 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7019A. If the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 6. (Step S7018).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing F counter is 0 (step S7019A). If the value of the timing F counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7022A. If the value of the timing F counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 7 ( Step S7019). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 7 after addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7020A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7022A. If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 (Step S7021).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing G counter is 0 (step S7022A). If the value of the timing G counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7025. If the value of the timing G counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold notice determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 8 ( Step S7022). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the hold notice determination random number counter for the sum hold memory number 8 after the addition is 937 which is the maximum value (step S7023A). If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 is not 937, the process proceeds to step S7025 as it is. If the value of the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 is 937, the effect control CPU 101 sets 1 as the initial random number to the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 (Step S7024).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change frequency determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 2 (step S7025). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 2 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7026). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 2 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7028A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 2 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 2. 1 is set (step S7027).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing A counter is 0 (step S7028A). If the value of the timing A counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7031A. When the value of the timing A counter is 0 (that is, when the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 3. (Step S7028). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 3 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7029A). If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7031A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 3. 1 is set (step S7030).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing B counter is 0 (step S7031A). If the value of the timing B counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7034A. If the value of the timing B counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 4. (Step S7031). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 4 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7032A). If the value of the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7034A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 4 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 4. 1 is set (step S7033).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing C counter is 0 (step S7034A). If the value of the timing C counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7037A. If the value of the timing C counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 5. (Step S7034). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 5 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7035A). If the value of the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 5 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7037A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 5 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random display initial value for the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 5. 1 is set (step S7036).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing D counter is 0 (step S7037A). If the value of the timing D counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7040A. If the value of the timing D counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 6. (Step S7037). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change count determination random number counter for the summed retained storage number 6 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7038A). If the value of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 6 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7040A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 6 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 6. 1 is set (step S7039).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing E counter is 0 (step S7040A). If the value of the timing E counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7043A. If the value of the timing E counter is 0 (that is, if a random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 7. (Step S7040). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained memory number 7 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7041A). If the value of the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7043A. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 7 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 7. 1 is set (step S7042).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing F counter is 0 (step S7043A). If the value of the timing F counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S7046. If the value of the timing F counter is 0 (that is, if the random number update period has arrived), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold memory number 8. (Step S7043). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the retained display change frequency determination random number counter for the summed retained memory number 8 after addition is 157, which is the maximum value (step S7044A). If the value of the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 is not 157, the process proceeds to step S7046. If the value of the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 8 is 157, the effect control CPU 101 has a random number initial value in the hold display change count determination random number counter for the sum hold storage number 8. 1 is set (step S7045).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing A counter is 0 (step S7046). If the value of the timing A counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 2 to the timing A counter (step S7047).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing B counter is 0 (step S7048). If the value of the timing B counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 3 to the timing B counter (step S7049).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing C counter is 0 (step S7050). If the value of the timing C counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 4 to the timing C counter (step S7051).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing D counter is 0 (step S7052). If the value of the timing D counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 5 to the timing D counter (step S7053).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing E counter is 0 (step S7054). If the value of the timing E counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 6 to the timing E counter (step S7055).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the timing F counter is 0 (step S7056). If the value of the timing F counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 7 to the timing F counter (step S7057).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the timing G counter is 0 (step S7058). If the value of the timing G counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets 8 to the timing G counter (step S7059).

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 70 by executing the processing of steps S7001 to S7003, the update notice period (one in this example) 4 ms), the random number is updated.

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000A, S7004A to S7006, S7046 to S7047, in the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. The random number is updated at every update cycle (8 ms in this example).

  Also, by executing the processing of steps S7000B, S7007A to S7009, and S7048 to S7049, in the example shown in FIGS. The random number is updated at every update cycle (12 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000C, S7010A to S7012, and S7050 to S7051, in the example shown in FIGS. The random number is updated at every update cycle (16 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000D, S7013A to S7015, and S7052 to S7053, in the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. The random number is updated at every update cycle (20 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000E, S7016A to S7018, and S7054 to S7055, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 6, 6 timer interruptions The random number is updated at every update cycle (24 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000F, S7019A to S7021, and S7056 to S7057, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the pending notice determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 7, 7 timer interruption The random number is updated at every update cycle (28 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000G, S7022A to S7024, and S7058 to S7059, in the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. The random number is updated at every update cycle (32 ms in this example).

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, for the total pending storage number 5, The pending notice determination random number counters for the total pending storage number 6, the total pending storage number 7, and the total pending storage number 8 are configured such that the random number update periods are different from each other. Therefore, random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the case where the update cycle of the random numbers of the respective hold advance notice determination random number counters is simply changed at the update cycle every 1 timer interrupt to every 8 timer interrupts. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the update intervals of the random numbers of the pending notice determination random number counters are different from each other by setting the update cycle for each timer interrupt of a relatively prime number. With such a configuration, the updated random number values are likely to vary from each other, and the random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, a case has been shown in which the update period of each pending notice determination random number counter is made different by changing how many timer interrupts are updated. Regardless of the processing method shown in the embodiment, for example, one of a plurality of pending notice determination random number counters is updated by a loop process in the main process (the loop process of steps S702 to S707 shown in FIG. 30), and others The update period of each of the hold notice determination random number counters may be made different from each other by updating the hold notice determination random number counter of each of them with a timer interrupt process executed for each timer interrupt.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, only the random number update cycle of each pending notice determination random number counter is changed, and the random number update range is the same as 1 to 937. May be made different, and the update range of the random numbers may be made different in the same manner as in FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the description is omitted, but since the update range of each hold notice determination random number counter is the same in 1 to 937, each hold notice shown in FIGS. In the determination table, determination values are assigned in the same range of 1 to 937, respectively.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70 by executing the processing of steps S7025 to S7027, the update period for each timer interruption is determined for the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 2 The random number is updated in this example (4 ms).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000A, S7028A to S7030, and S7046 to S7047, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the hold display change count determination random number counter for the total hold storage number 3, 2 timers are used. The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (8 ms in this example).

  In addition, by executing the processing of steps S7000B, S7031A to S7033, and S7048 to S7049, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 4, 3 timers are used. The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (12 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000C, S7034A to S7036, and S7050 to S7051, in the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, for the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 5, The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (in this example, 16 ms).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000D, S7037A to S7039, and S7052 to S7053, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the timer display change number determination random number counter for the summed pending storage number 6 is 5 timers. The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (20 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000E, S7040A to S7042, and S7054 to S7055, in the example shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (24 ms in this example).

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S7000F, S7043A to S7045, and S7056 to S7057, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, 7 timers for the pending display change count determination random number counter for the total pending storage number 8 The random number is updated at an update cycle for each interrupt (28 ms in this example).

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, for the total pending storage number 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, for the total pending storage number 5, for the total pending storage number 6, The hold display change count determination random number counters for the total pending storage number 7 and the total pending storage number 8 are configured such that the random number update periods are different from each other. Therefore, random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the case where the update intervals of the random numbers of the pending display change frequency determination random number counter are simply made different from each other at the update cycle every 1 timer interrupt to every 7 timer interrupts is shown. Further, it may be configured such that the update intervals of the random numbers of the pending display change frequency determination random number counters are different from each other by setting the update cycle for each timer interrupt of a relatively prime number. With such a configuration, the updated random number values are likely to vary from each other, and the random number updates can be prevented from being synchronized.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, a case has been shown in which the update cycle of each pending display change frequency determination random number counter is made different by changing how many timer interrupts are updated. Regardless of the processing method shown in the embodiment, for example, one of a plurality of pending display change frequency determination random number counters is updated by a loop process in the main process (a loop process in steps S702 to S707 shown in FIG. 30). In addition, the update cycle of each of the hold display change count determination random number counters may be made different from each other by updating the other hold display change count determination random number counters by the timer interrupt process executed for each timer interrupt. .

  In the example shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, only the random number update cycle of each pending display change number determination random number counter is changed, and the update range of the random number is the same as 1 to 157. The update cycle may be varied, and the random number update range may be varied in the same manner as in FIGS.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the description is omitted, but the update range of each of the hold display change frequency determination random number counters is the same in 1 to 157. Therefore, each of the examples shown in FIGS. In the hold display change count determination table, determination values are assigned in the same range of 1 to 157, respectively.

  67 to 70, each of the hold advance notice determination random number counter and the hold display change count determination random number counter has a hold advance notice determination random number counter and a hold display change count determination corresponding to the other combined hold storage numbers. Random numbers are updated at a different update cycle from the random number counter. Therefore, by changing the update cycle, it is possible to prevent the update of random numbers by each of the hold notice determination random number counter and the hold display change frequency determination random number counter from being synchronized, and the hold notice effect is executed in a certain combination. Can be prevented.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the start winning occurs, and the first reserved memory or The hold storage information (in this example, the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command) is transmitted so that it can be recognized that the second hold memory has increased. Determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variation category command) indicating the determination result of the variation pattern type is transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the pre-reading notice effect including the hold notice effect when at least one of the hold memory information and the determination result information cannot be normally received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect including the hold notice effect from being erroneously executed without being based on the determination result of the prefetching determination.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility that a predetermined state (in this example, super reach) may be entered based on the determination result information. When the start winning designation command included in the hold storage information is not normally received, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  That is, determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variable category command) and hold storage information (in this example, a start prize designation command and a total pending storage) received collectively in one timer interruption at the time of a start winning prize If some commands are missed, even if other commands received in a batch are received, the reliability of the received commands may be lacking. If the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the received command as it is, an inconsistency occurs between the contents of the pre-reading notice effect and the contents of the variable display of the actually executed notice target. Reliability may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reliability of the prefetching notice effect is reduced by restricting the execution of the prefetching notice effect when the start winning designation command included in the hold storage information cannot be normally received. To prevent it.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the start winning designation command included in the hold memory information transmitted based on the one hold memory cannot be normally received, the fluctuation based on the one hold memory The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited until the display is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variable category command) transmitted based on one hold storage cannot be normally received, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display based on the hold storage of the first time is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted from when a command is missed or inconsistent until the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent is exhausted. Although shown, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited only to the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the start winning prize is normally set for the reserved memory generated after that If received, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may not be restricted even before the reserved memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent has been consumed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the process of confirming the prefetching notice setting restriction flag in step S6003 of the prefetching notice effect determining process, the process of setting determination hold information in step S6025, and the steps S8000 to S8014 of the effect symbol variation starting process. This processing is unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the determination of the pre-reading notice effect is not performed when a command is missed or inconsistency occurs, but the determination of the pre-reading notice effect itself is performed. The execution may be restricted. For example, in the pre-reading notice effect determination process, when a command miss or mismatch is detected in the determination process of steps S6006 to S6008, the process of step S6027 is executed to set the prefetching notice setting restriction flag, while steps S6006 to S6008 are performed. Regardless of the determination result or the presence of the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag, the process of determining the continuous notice effect in steps S6010 to S6016 and the process of determining the hold notice effect in steps S6503 to S6505 may be executed without fail. If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed by not performing the process of step S6507 of the hold notice effect determination process or the step S8108 of the effect symbol changing process. May be. In addition, as described above, the process for determining the continuous notice effect in steps S6010 to S6016 and the process for determining the hold notice effect in steps S6503 to S6505 are necessarily executed. At the execution timing of the processing in step S6507 or the processing in step S8108 of the effect symbol variation processing (execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect), missing or inconsistency occurs in the command stored in the start winning command storage area. It is possible to check each time whether or not there is any remaining, and if there is any missing or inconsistent remaining, it may be limited not to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the determination result information, whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, a symbol designation command that can specify the determination result of the big hit type, A variable category command that can specify whether or not a state (in this example, super reach) is set is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even when the determination result specified by the received symbol designation command is inconsistent with the determination result specified by the received variation category command. For this reason, it is possible to further prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the first notice effect (the hold notice effect in this example) that starts at the timing when the start winning occurs, or a timing other than the timing when the start prize occurs ( In this example, the second notice effect (in this example, “change of the variation mode at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “ Countdown "continuous notice effect). The production control microcomputer 100 is stored when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted after the change display based on one hold storage is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released. The second notice effect can be executed based on the hold memory. For this reason, it is possible to cancel the restriction state of the pre-reading notice effect early without making the content of the pre-reading notice effect feel uncomfortable. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a continuous production (in this example, a continuous notice production of “countdown”) executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays as a pre-reading notice production. Can be executed, and after the display of fluctuation based on one hold memory is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, and then based on the hold memory stored. The execution of continuous production is limited as a pre-reading notice production to be executed. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to prevent the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice effect executed after the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been removed from becoming difficult to understand.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variable display based on one hold memory, and after the restriction on the execution of the prefetching notice effect is released, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. It may be configured not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage stored when the user is in the process (for example, in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 48, after executing the process of step S8005, the process directly proceeds to step S8015. The process may be performed and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 may not be executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information. The effect control microcomputer 100 restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even if the specified result of the received start winning designation command is inconsistent with the specified result of the received total pending storage number designation command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that super reach is determined, the first mode (in this example, “countdown”) or the second mode (in this example, “when symbol changes”). ”Change mode”, “mode transition”) can be executed, and if it is determined that the super-reach is not achieved, the continuous notification effect of the second mode can be executed. . Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute the continuous notice effect of the second mode even when execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted. For this reason, the continuous notice effect in the second mode that can be executed both in the case of becoming super-reach and in the case that it is not possible to execute even if the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted. In addition to ensuring the reliability of the production, the appearance frequency of the pre-reading notice production can be secured to some extent, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation in the order in which the first winning prize opening 13 or the second starting prize opening is awarded. Execute the display. Then, even if the production control microcomputer 100 cannot successfully receive the start winning designation command, it adds the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (design designation command, variation category command). When received, the continuous notice effect of the second mode can be executed. Therefore, even if the start winning designation command cannot be normally received, if the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (symbol designation command, variable category command) are received, the super reach Since the continuous notice effect of the second mode that can be executed both in the case of and not in the case is made executable, the appearance frequency of the prefetch notice effect is also prevented while preventing the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered. It can be secured to some extent, and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the pre-reading notice production even when the pending storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in the regular order. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c based on the hold storage information. And even if it is a case where hold storage information or judgment result information cannot be received normally, when recognizing that the 1st hold memory or the 2nd hold memory increased, it will be in the increased hold memory. The display mode of the corresponding hold display is different from the normal display mode (in this example, green round display). Is displayed. For this reason, even if the hold memory information or the determination result information cannot be received normally, the number of the hold memories can be recognized by the player, and the player is prevented from feeling distrust. can do.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning prizes of the first starting winning prize port 13 and the second starting winning prize port 14, for example, Regardless of the winning order, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation display of the second special symbol as compared with the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed in this way, instead of the start winning designation command and the combined pending memory number designation command as the pending memory information, the first reserved memory number or the second You may comprise so that the pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command (1st pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command or 2nd pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command) which shows that the pending | holding memory number increased may be transmitted. That is, when a start winning is generated, a set of three commands, that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation command, may be transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt. Even in such a case, if the production control microcomputer 100 limits the execution of the pre-reading notice production based on having missed the reserved storage number addition designation command as the reserved storage information, Good. In this case, as the reserved memory information, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition that can recognize which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased as described above. A designated command may be transmitted, and a first reserved memory number designation command in which the first reserved memory number is set as EXT data, or a second reserved memory number designation command in which the second reserved memory number is set as EXT data. You may make it transmit.

  In addition, even when it is configured to preferentially execute the variation display of the second special symbol, the case where the first winning prize opening 13 is won and the case where the second starting prize opening 14 is won. In any case, it may be configured to execute the hold notice effect among the pre-read notice effects. As in this embodiment, a plurality of random number counters (holding notice determination random number counter, holding display change frequency determination random number counter, which will be described later) for determining the hold notice effect are provided, and the numerical range to be updated and the update cycle are set. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may prevent a pending | holding preliminary announcement effect being performed with a fixed combination, even if it makes start winning simultaneously at the 1st start winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14 by making it differ.

  In this embodiment, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown by using the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag. However, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown in this embodiment. It can't be limited to things.

(1) For example, the timing for determining whether or not the prefetching notice setting restriction period is in effect without performing management using a flag such as the prefetching notice setting restriction flag (for example, step S6002 of the prefetching notice effect determination process) Or the command stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area every time the timing symbol variation start processing (step S8000 timing) is confirmed, and the command is missed or inconsistent. You may make it determine every time whether the thing of a state remains. If there is still a command that has been missed or inconsistent, it is determined that the pre-reading notice setting limit period is in effect, and the command is missing or inconsistent. If there is no thing, it may be determined that the prefetch notice setting limit period is not in effect.

(2) Further, for example, even when management using a flag such as the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is performed, the number of variable displays until the reserved memory that causes the prefetching notice setting restriction is exhausted. The counter is used for management, and it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the restriction on the prefetching notice setting has been exhausted, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. May be. In this case, for example, when the prefetch notice setting limit flag is set and the prefetch notice setting restriction period is started in step S6027 of the prefetch notice effect determination process, the current total number of pending storage is set in the counter, The counter value is decremented by one. When the value of the counter reaches 0, it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the prefetching notice setting restriction has been consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Good. In this case, if a command is missed or inconsistent before the prefetching notice setting restriction period starts after setting the prefetching notice setting restriction flag and before the prefetching notice setting restriction period, It is sufficient to reset the total pending storage number in the counter and extend the pre-reading notice setting limit period until the reserved memory corresponding to the missed command or the inconsistency generated later is exhausted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the probability change state (high probability state) is always controlled after the big hit game is finished, and a predetermined number of times (71 times in this example) after the big hit game is finished. Although the case where it is applied to a gaming machine that ends the probability variation state (high probability state) based on the termination of the display is shown, the gaming machine to which the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied is such a game. I can't stop at the machine. For example, this embodiment shows a game machine provided with a normal big hit that is controlled only in a high base state (short-time state) in addition to a probability big hit that is controlled to a promiscuous state after the big hit game ends as a big hit type. A configuration for setting and executing the prefetching notice effect or a configuration for restricting setting and execution of the prefetching notice effect may be applied. In this case, for example, when a probable big hit is made, the probable state may be controlled until the next big hit occurs while controlling to the probable state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the big hit is normal, the high base state (time reduction state) is controlled after the big hit game ends, and the high base state is reached at the timing when the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) the change display is finished after the big hit game ends. (Time-short state) may be terminated. Further, in such a game machine, when it is configured to suddenly provide a probable big hit or small win, it is in a high base state in order to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state). In some cases, when sudden odd-decision jackpots are suddenly reached, a high probability state is controlled and a high base state is maintained after the big hit game based on sudden odd-variable jackpots. In some cases, it is desirable to control only to the high probability state after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit and not to control to the high base state (maintain the low base state).

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect or the hold notice effect as the pre-read notice effect shown in the above embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various forms of gaming machines. For example, the configuration for executing the continuous notice effect and the hold notice effect shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a sealed circulation pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in an enclosed area (for example, in a pachinko machine), and the game area provided in the pachinko machine In order to fire game balls through the game area, collect the game balls via the collection unit (for example, each winning opening, out port, foul ball return opening), and fire the collected game balls again into the game area In the enclosed area. In addition, in such a sealed circulation pachinko machine, when there is a prize at each prize opening, points corresponding to the number of prize balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the prize balls. Processing is performed. In such an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, when applying the configuration of the above-described embodiment and displaying the variation of the production pattern on the production display device of the enclosed circulation pachinko machine, a continuous notice effect or a hold notice effect In particular, when executing a holding notice effect, a plurality of random number counters (holding notice determining random number counter, holding display change number determining random number counter described later) for determining the holding notice effect are provided. By changing the numerical range to be updated and the update cycle, even if the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 are started simultaneously, the hold notice effect is executed in a certain combination. It may be configured to prevent.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each of a plurality of gaming media can pass through a first starting area and a second starting area at the same time. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through at least one of the first start area and the second start area, a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, the display result is derived and displayed, and the display result is determined in advance. The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the displayed specific display result is derived and displayed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

Each of the plurality of game media can pass through the first start area and the second start area at the same time, and is variable based on the game medium passing through the first start area or the second start area. A gaming machine that performs display and derives and displays a display result, and controls to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result,
A hold storage means capable of storing as a hold storage for a variable display that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the first start area or the second start area;
A hold display means for displaying hold specific information corresponding to each of the hold memories stored in the hold storage means;
Determining means for deciding whether to control to the advantageous state based on the hold storage read from the hold storage means;
Determination means for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
Production numerical data updating means for updating the production numeric data in a predetermined numerical range;
Based on the timing at which the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area, the production numerical data extraction means for extracting the production numerical data updated by the production numerical data update means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means and the numerical value data for the effect extracted by the numerical value data extraction means for the effect, the display mode of the hold specific information corresponding to the hold storage that is the object of the determination is a special mode. A holding notice execution means for executing a holding notice, and
Based on the determination result by the determination means, before the variable display that is the subject of the determination is started, comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the hold notice,
A plurality of the production numerical data update means are provided in association with the number of storage of the holding storage,
Each of the production numerical data updating means updates the production numerical data so as not to synchronize with the update result of the production numerical data by the production numerical data update means corresponding to other stored numbers,
The effect numerical data extracting means extracts the effect numerical data updated by the effect numerical data update means corresponding to the current stored number.

Images